1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Camera User Guide
©CANON INC. 2014 CDD-E598-010
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
14) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-10L
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Neck Strap
Lens Cap
(with cord)
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards *
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
(
16
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
1
)
(
11
)
(
2
) (
9
)(
10
)(
3
) (
6
) (
7
)(
5
)(
4
) (
8
) (
3
)
(
18
)(
19
) (
20
)(
17
)
(1) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(2) Shutter button
(3) Strap mount
(4) Front dial
(5) Mode dial
(6) Flash
(7) Microphone
(8) Lamp
(9) Speaker
(10) External microphone IN terminal
(11) Focal length markings (approx.)
(12) Lens
(13) Lens hood/filter adapter mount
(14) [
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
button
(15)
(N-Mark)*
(16) [
(Framing Assist – Lock)]
button
(17) Tripod socket
(18) Lock release switch
(19) Memory card/battery cover
(20) DC coupler cable port
* Used with NFC features (
=
123).
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor and viewnder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
[
] Front dial (4) on front
[ ] Up button (16) on back
[ ] Left button (22) on back
[ ] Right button (18) on back
[ ] Down button (19) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
(
15
)
(
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
2
)
(
13
)
(
12
)
(
1
)
(
11
) (
21
)(
10
) (
20
)
(
6
) (
8
) (
9
)(
5
)(
4
) (
7
)
(
16
)
(
14
)
(
3
)
(
22
)
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)
(2) Wi-Fi antenna area
(3) Diopter adjustment dial
(4) Viewfinder
(5) Hot shoe
(6) Power button
(7) [
(Shortcut)] button
(8) Remote terminal
(9) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
(10) Indicator
(11) [
(Playback)] button
(12) HDMI
TM
terminal
(13) [
(Exposure compensation)] /
[
(Single-image erase)] button
(14) Movie button
(15) [
(AF frame selector)] button
(16) [
(Wi-Fi)] / [ (Single shot)] /
Up button
(17) FUNC./SET button
(18) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(19) [
(Display)] / Down button
(20) [
] button
(21) [
(Mobile Device Connection)]
button
(22) [
(Macro)] / [ (Manual focus)]
/ Left button
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics ...........................................................25
On/Off ..................................................................................... 25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 26
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................26
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 26
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 26
Viewnder ............................................................................... 27
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 27
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 28
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 29
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 30
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 31
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 32
Clock ...................................................................................... 32
2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ................................33
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 33
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................33
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 35
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................36
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................36
Still Images ............................................................................ 36
Movies ...................................................................................37
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 37
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................38
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................39
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................39
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 40
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 40
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information ..............................................................2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide ............................ 3
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations.............................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 17
Attaching Accessories ...............................................................17
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................19
Using the Screen .......................................................................20
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation ..........................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 21
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................24
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................55
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 55
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..............................................55
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ...............................55
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 56
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................56
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................56
3 Other Shooting Modes ..............................................57
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Shot) ....................................................................... 57
Choosing Effects .......................................................................58
Moving Subjects (Sports) ....................................................... 58
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 59
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 60
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........61
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 61
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 62
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................63
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........63
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................64
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................64
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 65
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 65
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection .....................................65
Using the Wink Self-Timer .....................................................65
Using the Face Self-Timer .....................................................66
Shooting Various Movies ........................................................ 67
Shooting Movies in Movie Mode ................................................67
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting ......68
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Seek) ............................................................40
Easily Composing Shots after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Lock) ............................................................. 41
Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a Constant Size ......................42
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ............................42
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist) ..............................................................................43
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 44
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................44
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................44
Adding a Date Stamp ................................................................45
Continuous Shooting .................................................................46
Image Display during Playback .............................................46
Using Face ID......................................................................... 47
Personal Information .................................................................47
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 47
Shooting ....................................................................................48
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................49
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................50
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 51
Image Customization Features .............................................. 51
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 51
Changing Image Resolution (Size) ............................................ 52
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 4:3 Images) .....................................................................52
Red-Eye Correction ...................................................................52
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........53
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................53
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 54
Using the Electronic Level ......................................................... 54
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................54
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Storing the Zoom Position .....................................................81
Storing the Focal Position .....................................................81
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................81
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................82
FlexiZone/Center ................................................................... 82
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone) .......................82
Face Detect ...........................................................................83
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....................83
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................84
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................84
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 85
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 85
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject
in Focus .....................................................................................86
Flash....................................................................................... 86
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................86
Auto .......................................................................................86
On ..........................................................................................86
Slow Synchro ........................................................................87
Off .......................................................................................... 87
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................87
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 88
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................88
Shooting RAW Images ........................................................... 89
Other Settings ........................................................................ 90
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 90
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 90
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .....................................................................91
Sound Settings ..........................................................................68
Adjusting the Recording Volume ...........................................68
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................69
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 69
Shooting iFrame Movies ............................................................ 69
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ......................................... 70
4 P Mode ........................................................................71
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 71
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 72
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 72
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................72
Changing the Metering Method .................................................72
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................73
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................73
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................74
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) ................ 74
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................74
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 75
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) .........................75
Shadow Correct .....................................................................76
Image Colors .......................................................................... 76
Adjusting White Balance ............................................................76
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 77
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................77
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................77
Custom Color.........................................................................78
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 79
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................79
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 79
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................80
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................80
Storing the Zoom or Focal Position ...........................................81
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .....................................107
Editing Face ID Information .................................................. 107
Changing Names ..................................................................... 107
Erasing Names ........................................................................108
Image Viewing Options ........................................................ 108
Magnifying Images ..................................................................108
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 109
Changing Slideshow Settings ..............................................109
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe) .................. 110
Protecting Images .................................................................110
Choosing a Selection Method ..................................................110
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 111
Selecting a Range ................................................................... 111
Protecting All Images at Once ................................................. 112
Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................112
Erasing Images .....................................................................112
Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................113
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................113
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................113
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 113
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................114
Rotating Images ....................................................................114
Deactivating Auto Rotation ...................................................... 115
Tagging Images as Favorites ................................................115
Editing Still Images ................................................................ 116
Resizing Images ......................................................................116
Cropping ..................................................................................117
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................118
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................118
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................119
5 Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode ......................................92
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 92
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 93
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 93
Adjusting the Flash Output ........................................................94
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ........................................................................................ 95
Changing Settings during Recording .....................................95
Customization for Shooting Styles ......................................... 96
Customizing Display Information ............................................... 96
Assigning Functions to Buttons .................................................96
Customizing the FUNC. Menu (FUNC. Menu Layout) ........... 97
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu .....................................97
Rearranging Menu Items ....................................................... 98
Saving Shooting Settings ..........................................................98
Settings that can be saved ....................................................98
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .......99
6 Playback Mode ........................................................101
Viewing ................................................................................. 101
Switching Display Modes .........................................................102
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ....................103
Histogram ............................................................................103
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 103
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................104
Viewing by Date ...................................................................104
Checking People Detected in Face ID .....................................104
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................. 105
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 105
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .......................105
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ........................106
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adding Comments ................................................................... 139
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 139
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 139
Preparing the Camera .........................................................139
Preparing the Computer ......................................................140
Sending Images .......................................................................140
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 141
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................141
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................142
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 143
Editing Connection Information ...............................................143
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................143
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................143
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................144
8 Setting Menu ............................................................145
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 145
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................145
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................145
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................146
Date and Time .........................................................................146
World Clock .............................................................................146
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 147
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................147
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................147
Screen Brightness ...................................................................148
Hiding the Start-Up Screen ......................................................148
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 148
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 149
File Numbering ........................................................................149
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 150
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................150
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 120
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 121
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 121
7 Wi-Fi Functions........................................................122
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 122
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 123
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ...................123
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ..........................125
Using Another Access Point ....................................................126
Previous Access Points ...........................................................127
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 127
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 127
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................127
Installing the Software .........................................................127
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................129
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................129
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 129
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................130
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................132
Previous Access Points .......................................................132
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 133
Registering Web Services .......................................................133
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................133
Registering Other Web Services .........................................135
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................135
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 136
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 137
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 138
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................138
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size) .................................... 139
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 150
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 150
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................151
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................151
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 151
Display Language .................................................................... 152
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 152
Restoring Defaults ................................................................... 152
9 Accessories .............................................................153
System Map ......................................................................... 154
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 155
Power Supplies ........................................................................155
Flash Units ...............................................................................155
Other Accessories ...................................................................155
Printers ....................................................................................156
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 157
Playback on a TV ....................................................................157
Playback on a High-Denition TV ........................................ 157
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV.................................158
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 158
Using an External Microphone ................................................159
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately) .....................................160
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) ....................................... 160
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..............................161
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................161
Speedlite EX Series ............................................................161
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately) .............. 162
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately) .................................................................163
Using the Software ............................................................... 164
Software ..................................................................................164
Software Instruction Manual ................................................ 164
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 164
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................164
Installing the Software .........................................................164
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 165
Printing Images .................................................................... 166
Easy Print ................................................................................166
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 167
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................168
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............168
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 169
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................169
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 169
Movie Printing Options ........................................................169
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................170
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................170
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................171
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 171
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................171
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................171
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 172
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................172
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................172
Adding Images Individually ..................................................172
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................173
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................173
10
Appendix .................................................................. 174
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 174
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 178
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 180
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................180
Battery Level .......................................................................180
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................181
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................182
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 182
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................182
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................184
Shooting Tab ............................................................................187
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 194
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................194
Playback Tab ...........................................................................194
Print Tab ..................................................................................195
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 195
Specications ....................................................................... 196
Camera Specications .............................................................196
Wi-Fi ....................................................................................196
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent) ....................196
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 197
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................197
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................198
Flash Range ........................................................................198
Shooting Range ...................................................................198
Continuous Shooting Speed ................................................198
Shutter Speed .....................................................................199
Aperture ...............................................................................199
Battery Pack NB-10L ........................................................... 199
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE .....................................199
Lens Hood LH-DC90 ...........................................................199
Index..................................................................................... 200
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 202
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 202
Security Precautions ................................................................202
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................203
Disclaimer ............................................................................203
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
33,
=
35
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
57
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
59)
Against Snow
(
=
59)
Matching specic scenes
Sports
(
=
58)
Night Scenes
(
=
59)
Low Light
(
=
59)
Fireworks
(
=
59)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
60)
Poster Effect
(
=
60)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
62)
Miniature Effect
(
=
62)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
63)
Soft Focus
(
=
64)
Monochrome
(
=
64)
● Focus on faces
-
=
33,
=
59,
=
83,
=
85
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
33
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
44,
=
66
● Add a date stamp
-
=
45
● Use Face ID
-
=
47,
=
104
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
35
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
165
● Save images to a computer
-
=
165
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
123
● Share images online
-
=
133
● Send images to a computer
-
=
127
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
101
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
109
● On a TV
-
=
157
● On a computer
-
=
164
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
105
● Erase images
-
=
112
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
33,
=
67
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
101
● Fast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback
-
=
70
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
166
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense articial
light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
16
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
17
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
Attach the strap.
● Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
● On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
2
Attach the lens cap.
● Remove the lens cap from the lens and
attach the lens cap cord to the strap.
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LC: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
● CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LC
CB-2LCE
(
1
)
(
2
)
● Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the neck strap when the cap
is not in use.
● Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your neck.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● Remove the cover from the battery pack,
align the marks on the battery pack
and charger, and insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
(
1
)
(
2
)
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the
terminals (1) facing as shown, press the
battery lock (2) in the direction of the
arrow and insert the battery pack until the
lock clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position.
● Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover in the direction of the
arrow and press it until it clicks into the
closed position.
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
197).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
197).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
148).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (
=
45).
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
date and time.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
Using the Screen
● Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
● Close the screen in this orientation (3).
● The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
● You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
● To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
● Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewnder.
● When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
choose [Reverse Disp.] on the [
] tab, and press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Off].
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
155), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ]
tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Date/Time], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(1)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your nger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the ash, push it
down with your nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button to access the movie
control panel, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume (1), press the
[
][ ] buttons.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
113).
(1)
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
● To view the previous image, press the [ ]
button. To view the next image, press the
[ ] button.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
● To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
26).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
1
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
26).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
147).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
122), or when connected to a computer
(
=
165).
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
7
)
(
6
)
(
5
)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
22,
=
33,
=
35).
(2) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
each shot automatically (
=
57).
(3) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(
=
58).
(4) Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (
=
59).
(5) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
71,
=
92).
(6) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
67).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(7) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (
=
60).
Viewnder
Adjust the viewnder display for sharper images by adjusting the diopter,
as follows.
1
Activate the viewnder.
● Press the [ ] button several times until
the viewnder goes on (
=
28).
2
Adjust the diopter.
● As you look through the viewnder, turn
the dial one way or the other so that
images look sharp.
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
102).
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (
=
180).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
deactivate it and activate the viewnder (
=
20).
LCD Monitor (Screen)
No information is displayed
Information is displayed
Viewnder
No information is displayed
Information is displayed
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
152).
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
184).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
● Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Options labeled with a [
] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
(1)
(2)
30
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to select the menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
152).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
187 –
=
194).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
● After you have pressed the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a tab initially, you can
switch between tabs by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
31
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Deleting Characters
● To delete the previous character,
choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Alternatively, press the [ ] button.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
● The on-screen keyboard is not available while the viewnder
(
=
28) is in use.
● You can conrm input and return to the previous screen while the
on-screen keyboard is displayed by closing the screen.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections
(
=
122). Note that the length and type of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a character, and then press the [ ]
button to enter it.
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
Entering Line Breaks
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Switching Input Modes
● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
● To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [
] and press
the [ ] button.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
(1)
32
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
to change the display color.
● Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
3) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On Camera on
Blinking
Recording/reading/transmitting images, distance
warning (
=
174), or cannot focus (when the
ash is deactivated) (
=
174)
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
33
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
37,
=
39).
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
2
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
34
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
(1)
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A
zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
(2).)
● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
● Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your nger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the ash, push it
down with your nger, into the camera.
(1)
(2)
35
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
33) to compose the shot and
focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
33) to shoot a still image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to
the subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range”
(
=
198).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
198).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
37) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
56).
● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
145).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
110).
- Daylight saving time (
=
20) or time zone (
=
146) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
150).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
121).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify
the date of the digest movie to play (
=
104).
Still Images/Movies
● To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is
blank (when display is set to the viewnder), press the [
] button
several times.
● If the camera is turned on while the [
] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
[
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
38).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
Movies
● The camera may become warm when shooting movies repeatedly
over an extended period. This does not indicate damage.
● Before shooting a movie, lower the ash with your nger. Be
careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie.
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (
=
90).
(
1
)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
● If you prefer not to record sound, choose MENU (
=
30) ►
[
] tab ► [Sound rec.] ► [Disable].
38
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [ ].
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the ash will
not re, and the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
].
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive mode other than [
] (
=
38,
=
46) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
53).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
47). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
20).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
71) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
39
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
71) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[ ] and [ ] modes.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ]
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting
movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
90). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
40
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (
=
52), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can nd it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
1
Look for the lost subject.
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
● The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [
] button.
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 260x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
(1)
41
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Easily Composing Shots after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Lock)
Still Images
Movies
You can reduce camera shake at the telephoto end, which makes it easier
to compose shots.
1
Compensate camera shake at the
telephoto end.
● Press and hold the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed, and image stabilization optimal
for shooting at the telephoto end is
applied.
2
Shoot.
● While holding the [ ] button, press the
shutter button halfway to focus on the
subject, and then press it all the way
down.
● The zoom factor cannot be adjusted by pressing the [ ] button
(
=
40) while you are holding down the [ ] button.
● Recomposing the shot while holding down the [
] button may
make image stabilization less effective. In this case, [
] is
displayed in gray. If this occurs, release the [
] button, compose
the shot, and then press it again.
● If you start recording a movie while holding down the [
] button,
image stabilization may cause the shot to be recomposed.
2
Reacquire the subject.
● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
● The previous magnication is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame lls the screen again.
● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [
] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [
] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [
] button.
● To adjust the area displayed when the [
] button is pressed,
access MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [ Display Area], and
choose one of the three options.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(
=
44).
42
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Shoot.
● Even after you shoot, [ ] remains
around the face displayed at a constant
size.
● To cancel constant face display size,
press the [
] button again. [ Auto: Off]
is displayed.
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
● When Auto is on, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the desired option.
● The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specied size.
Face
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Upper Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Whole Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Manual
Keep faces at the size specied by moving the zoom
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size
has been obtained.
● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
● When
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
and some shooting settings cannot be congured.
● Although no image stabilization icon is shown while you hold
down the [
] button, image stabilization optimal for shooting at
the telephoto end is applied.
● To ne-tune the size of subjects gradually, move the zoom lever
while holding down the [
] button.
Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a Constant Size
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
=
83) at a constant size on the screen. If the person moves closer, the
camera automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be
adjusted, as needed.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode.
● Press and release the [ ] button quickly.
● [
Auto: On] is displayed.
2
Choose the face.
● [ ] is displayed once a face has been
detected.
● If multiple faces are detected, press the
[
] button to switch to the face to keep
at a constant size.
● The camera zooms in and out to keep the
face framed by [
] at a constant size on
the screen.
43
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Reacquire the subject.
● Once you nd the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
4
Shoot.
● To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
● When the feature described in “Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a
Constant Size” is deactivated, [
] is displayed around a detected
face, and the camera automatically zooms out when moved.
● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a Constant Size” (
=
42),
choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [ Auto Settings] ►
[Seek Assist] ► [Off].
● If the person whose face is framed with [ ] moves toward the
edge of the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in
view.
● In step 3, switching [
] to another face with the [ ] button is
not possible during movie recording.
● The zoom factor remains the same after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
44), even if the
person’s size relative to the screen changes.
● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (
=
30) ► [ ]
tab ► [
Auto Settings] ► [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose
[Off] to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described
in “Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)”
(
=
43).
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
● Smile detection can be paused in [
] mode (
=
65) by
pressing the [
] button. To resume detection, press the button
again.
● You can clear your specied face size during movie recording by
pressing the [
] button.
● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out, which makes it easier to nd the subject.
1
Enter [ ] Auto mode (=
42).
2
Look for the lost subject.
● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you nd it.
44
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
44) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
44) to shoot.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
44), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button immediately.
2
Congure the setting.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose the [Delay]
time, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the number of [Shots], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
44) to shoot.
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
45
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Shoot.
● As you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one
as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already
have one may cause it to be printed twice.
- Print using printer functions (
=
166)
- Use camera DPOF print settings (
=
170) to print
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website
(
=
164) to print
● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
Adding a Date Stamp
Still Images
Movies
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right
corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so conrm
beforehand that the date and time are correct (
=
20).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Date
Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
30).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
46
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
112), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
107) and
ungrouped (
=
107).
● Protecting (
=
110) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (
=
105) or Smart Shufe (
=
110). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
107), magnifying (
=
108),
tagging as favorites (
=
115), editing (
=
116), printing
(
=
166), setting up individual image printing (
=
171), or
adding to a photobook (
=
172). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
107) or cancel grouping
(
=
107) rst.
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (
=
198).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
44).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
33) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr.] (
=
53) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
47
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Add to Registry], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a New Face], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Register face information.
● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
● A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (
=
105).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
51).
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Display the screen on the LCD
monitor.
● Open the LCD monitor to display the
screen (
=
20,
=
28).
48
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
6
Continue registering face
information.
● To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 3.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 3.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 4, Babies or Children icons
(
=
37) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
47).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
● When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
● Shoot.
● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
● After [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
4
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
31).
● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Birthday], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
date.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
5
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save], and then press the [ ] button.
● After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then
press the [ ] button.
49
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
● Following step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
47), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person to check or edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
● To check a name or birthday, choose
[Edit Prole] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step 4
of “Registering Face ID Information”
(
=
47).
● To check face information, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Face Info
List], and then press the [ ] button. To
erase face information, press the [ ]
button on the screen displayed, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the face
information to erase, and then press the
[ ] button. After [Erase?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
107).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
47).
● When information display is set to off (
=
28), names will not
display, but will be recorded in the image.
● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in [Custom Display] (
=
96) on the
[
] tab so that the names are not displayed.
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [
] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
102).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
46,
=
86) will
continue to be recorded in the same position as for the rst shot,
even if subjects move.
50
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the face info to overwrite, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
● Follow step 3 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
47) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
49), and then register new face
information (
=
47) as needed.
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
● You can use the software (
=
164) to edit registered names.
Some characters entered with the software may not display on
the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
● Following step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
47), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of a person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
● If ve items of face info have already been
registered, a message will be displayed.
Choose [OK] by pressing the [
][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
● If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
51
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display
on standard-denition televisions or similar display devices, or for
printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
47) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of a person to erase, and then
press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
104), overwrite their info (
=
107), or
search images for them (
=
105).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
108).
52
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Red-Eye Correction
Still Images
Movies
Red-eye that occurs in ash photography can be automatically corrected
as follows.
1
Access the [Built-in Flash Settings]
screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than
eyes (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils,
for example).
● You can also correct existing images (
=
119).
● You can also access the screen in step 2 when the ash is up by
pressing the [
] button and immediately pressing the [ ]
button.
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can t on a memory card, see
“Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
197).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
53
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will t on a memory card,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
198).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 60 fps
For shooting in Full
HD. [
] enables
movies with smoother
motion
1920 x 1080 30 fps
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in
standard denition
● In [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on
the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not
recorded.
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
46), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
54
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Check the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
40)
- When Tracking AF is used (
=
83)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
157)
● Not available in [
] mode.
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.
1
Display the electronic level.
● Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2
Level the camera as needed.
● Level the camera so that the center of the
electronic level is green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button, and on the [ ] tab, choose [Custom Display].
Add a [
] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level.
● Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you
from using the electronic level, which will turn gray.
● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
● If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try
calibrating the electronic level (
=
150).
55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (
=
30).
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Built-in Flash Settings]
screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Shoot.
● [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
56).
● This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
mode (
=
38).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
46,
=
86).
56
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
56).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Display Info]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
181).
● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images, by pressing the [
] button.
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Display Time]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
57
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Enjoying a Variety of Images from
Each Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press
the [ ] button.
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
107).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Focus.
● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
3
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
73) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● For details on the shooting range in [
] mode, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
198).
● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
Choosing Effects
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
● After choosing [
] mode, turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
59
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting under Low Light (Low Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Still Images
Movies
● Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of reworks.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
73) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
90).
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
29).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
60
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
29).
3
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
33).
● [
] mode resolution is [ ] (2304 x 1728) and cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
61
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adding Artistic Effects
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
● Turn the [
] dial to choose a color
effect.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
2
Shoot.
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
90).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
62
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [
][ ] buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
63
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the [
][ ] buttons
again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
51). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
64
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (
=
60) and choose
[ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
65
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
55) is only
available for the nal shot.
● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [
] button.
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
Still Images
Movies
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
● To pause smile detection, press the [
]
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
66
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using the Face Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
83). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
4
Face the camera and wink.
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
55) is only
available for the nal shot.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
67
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shooting Movies in Movie Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
182).
3
Shoot.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
55) is only
available for the nal shot.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
68
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Adjusting the Recording Volume
Although the recording level (volume) is automatically adjusted to reduce
distortion, you can set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.
1
Access the [Sound rec.] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Sound rec.] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Sound rec.], and then choose
[Manual] (
=
30).
● Press the [
] button, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to congure the [Level]
setting.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Auto].
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of −2 to +2 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
● While holding the shutter button halfway
down, press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. [ ] is displayed.
● To unlock the exposure, press the [
]
button again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
exposure, as you watch the screen.
3
Shoot.
● To make the sound of the [ ] dial quieter while you are
recording a movie, press the [
][ ] buttons and adjust the setting.
● You can switch between adjusting the exposure compensation
and focal position during MF (
=
79) movie recording each time
you press the [
] button. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to congure
these settings.
69
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies
using the software (
=
164).
1
Choose [ ].
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
67).
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● The resolution is [ ] (
=
53) and cannot be changed.
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Reduce audio distortion from strong wind. (To ensure natural sound, do
not use unless there is wind.) In this case, you can deactivate the wind
lter.
● Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume”.
● Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
● Choose [Wind Filter], and then choose
[Off] (
=
30).
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
● Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume”.
● Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator], and then
press the [
] button.
● Choose [Attenuator], and then choose
[On] (
=
30).
70
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
● Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
● When you play the movie (
=
101), it will be played back in slow
motion.
● You can change the playback speed of movies by using the
software (
=
164).
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Choose a frame rate.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired frame
rate (
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
3
Shoot (=
67).
● Press the movie button.
● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.
30 sec.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Frame Rate Image Quality
Playback Time
(For a 30-sec. Clip)
240 fps (320 x 240)
Approx. 4 min.
120 fps (640 x 480)
Approx. 2 min.
71
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
72 – =
90), and then shoot.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
73) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
86),
which may enable adequate exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
29) and MENU
(
=
30) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
4
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (
=
182).
72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
the AF frame (
=
73).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
● Press the [
] button. As you watch the
screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
again when nished.
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
73
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an ISO speed.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO
speed to suit the shooting mode
and conditions.
100, 125, 160, 200 Low
For shooting outdoors
in fair weather.
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
Slightly
Low
For shooting in
cloudy conditions, or
at twilight.
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200
Slightly
High
For shooting night
scenes, or in dark
rooms.
● If motion blur is not reduced enough at an ISO speed of [3200],
you can specify [
] mode (
=
59) and choose [4000], [5000],
or [6400].
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
72) to choose
[ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
30).
● The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
82).
● Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face Detect] (
=
83)
or [Tracking AF] (
=
83).
74
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
● Not available with [ ] or [ ] (
=
89).
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [3200], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
● You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the
ISO speed setting screen (
=
73) is displayed, by pressing the
[
] button.
75
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● You can also correct existing images (
=
118).
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Movies
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29
).
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Options Details
Available ISO Speed
(
=
73)
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [100] – [3200]
Tone down highlights by about 200%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
[AUTO], [200] – [3200]
Tone down highlights by about 400%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
[AUTO], [400] – [3200]
● ISO speed (
=
73) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supported range if you have specied a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
86).
● Continuous shooting (
=
86) is not available in this mode.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
72), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
72) is displayed.
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
44).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
55), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
76
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
77).
Shadow Correct
Still Images
Movies
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
77
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Congure advanced settings.
● To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] dial
or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
] button to complete
the setting.
● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps in
“Adjusting White Balance” (
=
76)), but correction levels will be
reset if you record custom white balance data.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
76) to choose [ ] or
[ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
76) to choose [ ].
● Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
78
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
77) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
● Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
and other qualities as desired (
=
78).
● White balance (
=
76) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
79
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
198).
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (1, which shows the distance and
focal position) and the magnied display
area, press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify
the general focal position.
● To adjust the magnication, press the [
]
button.
● To move the magnied display area,
press the [
] button and then the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button to return to the
shooting screen.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
(1)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (
=
198).
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
● In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [
] will turn
gray and the camera will not focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
44).
80
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
86).
● Continuous shooting (
=
86) is not available in this mode.
● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
79).
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
44).
● In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
55), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (
=
82) is
[FlexiZone] and AF frame size (
=
82) is [Normal], and these
settings cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
40) or
digital tele-converter (
=
81), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
157), but the magnied display will not appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, press
the [ ] button, choose [Peaking], and
then choose [On] (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
81
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
30).
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(
=
40) or AF-point zoom (
=
54).
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
40).
Storing the Zoom or Focal Position
Still Images
Movies
Zoom positions set with the zoom lever or focal positions set manually are
normally reset once you turn the camera off, but they can also be stored
on the camera.
Storing the Zoom Position
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Recall Zoom/MF Settings] on the
[ ] tab, press the [ ] button, and then
choose [On] (
=
30).
Storing the Focal Position
● Follow the steps in “Storing the Zoom
Position” (
=
81).
● Choose [MF Memory], and then choose
[On] (
=
30).
● Zoom positions set in [ ] Auto mode (
=
42) cannot be stored.
82
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [FlexiZone] (
=
82).
1
Prepare to move the AF frame.
● Press the [ ] button. The AF frame
turns orange.
2
Move and resize the AF frame.
● Turn the [ ] dial to move the AF
frame, or press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to move it by a smaller amount.
● To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, keep the [
]
button held down.
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the
[
] button. Press it again to restore
it to the original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
40) or digital tele-converter (
=
81).
● You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
=
73).
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
FlexiZone/Center
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (
=
82).
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway and [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
54) is set to [On].
83
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
] button
again.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(
=
84).
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
● [Servo AF] (
=
84) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
30) is not available.
Face Detect
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), an AF frame is displayed in the center of
the screen when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF
Frame Mode” (
=
82) to choose
[Tracking AF].
● [
] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
84
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
30).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (
=
47). However, a name will display if the subject
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face
ID.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
30).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed while
you are pressing the shutter button halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
30) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
44).
85
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people
detected are not displayed when you have selected another,
unregistered face to focus on. However, their names will be
recorded in the still images (
=
47).
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
● To unlock the focus, after you release
the shutter button, press the [
] button
again, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Prepare the camera for Face Select.
● Set the AF frame to [Face Detect]
(
=
83).
2
Enter Face Select mode.
● Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
● After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
● Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
● If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
3
Choose the face to focus on.
● To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
● After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specied AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
4
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
198).
1
Lift the ash.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a ash mode, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ]
button when the ash is lowered. Lift the ash with your nger in
advance.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed”
(
=
198).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● The images are managed together as a
group (
=
107).
● In [ ] mode (
=
59), manual focus mode (
=
79), or when
AF is locked (
=
85), [ ] is changed to [ ].
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
44).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
72), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
● Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the ash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
30) and
choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
30) and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash
Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen
(
=
30) as follows (except when an optional external ash is
mounted).
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
90).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
88
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
30).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
72), you can lock the exposure for the ash
shots.
1
Lift the ash and set the ash to [ ]
(=
86).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
● The ash res, and when
[
] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE: Flash Exposure
89
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
164).
● Digital zoom (
=
40), date stamps (
=
45), and red-eye
reduction (
=
52) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes.
Additionally, noise reduction level (
=
74), i-Contrast (
=
75)
and My Colors (
=
77) cannot be congured.
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Shooting RAW Images
Still Images
Movies
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
Digital Photo Professional (
=
164) to adjust RAW images as desired
with minimal loss of image quality.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29
).
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera
for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce le size.
However, the compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image
processing may also cause some loss of image quality.
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed)
data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the
camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst use the
software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality.
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will t on a
card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
197).
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for
each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without
using the software.
90
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
desired option (
=
30).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
39).
Shoot Only*
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of
shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
197).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
29).
91
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce signicant camera shake.
● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (
=
90) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (
=
30).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
92
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (
=
199).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
90).
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
]
and cannot be changed.
● Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
93).
● [ ]: Time value
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
93
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (
=
199) and “Aperture” (
=
199).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose adjustment
of shutter speed (1) or aperture value (2),
and turn the [ ] dial to specify a value.
● An exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied value is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the standard exposure level (3).
● [
] or [ ] is displayed when the difference
from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
199).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the
lens)
● To avoid exposure problems in [
] and [ ] modes, you
can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or
aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise
be obtained. Press the [
] button and set [Safety Shift] on
the [
] tab to [On] (
=
30).
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ] mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Specify the ash mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● In [Flash Mode], choose [Manual]
(
=
30).
3
Congure the setting.
● Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
30)
and choosing [
] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Output].
● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen
(
=
30) as follows (except when an optional external ash is
mounted).
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
● After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
]
and cannot be changed.
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
72).
95
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing Settings during Recording
Settings can also be adjusted while you are recording a movie, by
following step 2 in “Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values” (
=
95). However, any changes in brightness are
recorded in the movie.
● To make the sound of the [ ] dial quieter, press the [ ][ ]
buttons and adjust the setting.
● You can switch between adjusting the shutter speed, aperture
value, ISO speed, and focal position during MF (
=
79) movie
recording each time you press the [
] button. Press the [ ][ ]
buttons to congure these settings.
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Specic Shutter Speeds” (
=
92), “Specic Aperture Values”
(
=
93), and “Changing the ISO Speed” (
=
73).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter
speed, aperture value, or ISO speed,
and then turn the [ ] dial to choose
a value.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be recorded.
● With [ ], the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, showing the difference from the standard
exposure level.
● With settings other than [
], an exposure level mark based on
your specied shutter speed and aperture value is shown for
comparison to the standard exposure level.
96
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
● Grayed-out items can also be specied, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [ ]
button, movie button ( button), or [ ] button.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Set
Shortcut button], [Set button] or [Set
button] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a function to assign, and then press the
[
] button.
3
Use the assigned function as
needed.
● To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
Customization for Shooting Styles
Customizing Display Information
Still Images
Movies
Set the number of custom displays (
=
28) and what information is
displayed in each display when the [ ] button is pressed in shooting
screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [ ] tab, and
then press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then press the [ ] button.
Items you choose for display are labeled
with [ ].
● Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
Shooting Info
Displays shooting information (
=
180).
Grid Lines Displays a reference grid.
Electronic Level
Displays the electronic level (
=
54).
Histogram
Displays a histogram (
=
103) in [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
97
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons and press
the [ ] button to choose icons to include
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are
marked with a [ ].
● Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
● Items without a [
] will be available on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button],
[
] in [Set button], and [ ] in [Set button].
● Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
● With [
] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
white balance data (
=
77), and the white balance setting
changes to [
] or [ ].
● With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
the focus. [
] is then displayed.
● With [
], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Raise or lower the ash
● You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
98
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Settings that can be saved
● Shooting mode ([ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ])
● Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] modes (
=
72 –
=
93)
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
● Manual focus positions (
=
79)
● My Menu settings (
=
99)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination, and then press the [ ]
button.
● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
● Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu
(
=
99), and then add to the FUNC. menu again will be
removed from My Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (
=
97),
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
] or [ ] button to choose an
icon to move. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
99
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to ve commonly used shooting menu items on the [ ]
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select items], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Choose up to ve menu items to save by
pressing the [
][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
● Press the [
] button.
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ]
or [
], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore
default values, turn the mode dial to [
] or [ ] and choose
[Reset All] (
=
152).
100
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Sort], and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose a menu item to move by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons, and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to change the
order, and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[
] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes].
101
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
● To view the previous image, press the [ ]
button. To view the next image, press the
[ ] button.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
6
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
102
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (
=
181).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
deactivate it and activate the viewnder (
=
20).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
● Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
30) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(1)
103
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
141). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
102).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information display
(
=
102) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
● The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (
=
96,
=
180).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
● The RGB histogram (1) shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
(
1
)
104
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose a date (
=
30).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
102),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
47)
will be displayed.
● Press the [
] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
35) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
● Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with an [ ] icon.
● Choose a still image labeled with
[
] and press the [ ] button.
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK]
(
=
29).
● The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
102).
105
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
110) or delete (
=
112) these images all at once.
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
47).
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
115).
Still image/
Movie
Displays only still images or movies.
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [
]
mode (
=
35).
1
Choose [Image Search].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Image Search] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose the rst condition for image
display or navigation.
● When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. To perform
an action for all of these images together,
press the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons), choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Index
Effect] ► [Off].
106
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
115).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
● Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[ ] dial and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
● Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
● Turning the [ ] dial when browsing images in index display
will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump
method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have
chosen [
] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
3
Choose the second condition and
check the images found.
● To switch to ltered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 4.
● When you have selected [
] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the next
screen to choose a person.
4
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
● To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available. Note that [
] is
not available unless people are registered (
=
47).
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
105), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
108), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
109). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
110) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
113), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
170), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
172).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
116 –
=
120), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
107
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
ID Info], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
104),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose the name to change,
and press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the editing option.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Overwrite], and then press the [ ]
button.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot consecutively (
=
46,
=
58,
=
86) or in [ ] or [ ]
mode (
=
57,
=
58) are displayed as a group but can also be viewed
individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image labeled with [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
View images in the group
individually.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons will display
only images in the group.
● Pressing the [
] button will display
[Display all images]. Press [ ] to cancel
group playback.
● During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
105) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
108). By choosing [All
Images in Group] for “Protecting Images” (
=
110), “Erasing
Multiple Images at Once” (
=
113), “Adding Images to the Print
List (DPOF)” (
=
170), or “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
172), all images in the group can be manipulated at once.
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Group Images]
► [Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
57) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
108
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image, and
[ ] is displayed. You can magnify
images up to about 10x by continuing to
hold the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● While [
] is displayed, you can switch
to [ ] by pressing the [ ] button. To
switch to other images while zoomed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press the
[ ] button again to restore the original
setting.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
(
1
)
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
50) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
● Following step 3 in “Changing Names”
(
=
107), choose [Erase] and press the
[ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
109
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Congure the settings.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
30).
3
Start automatic playback.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Start], and then press the [ ] button.
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
26) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ]
buttons down.
110
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(
=
112).
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
30).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
148,
=
149).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Smart
Shufe] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
30).
● Four candidate images are displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
105)
- During group playback (
=
107)
111
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
110), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
110), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
[ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
112
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
110) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Pressing the [ ] button while [ ] images are displayed will give
you the option of choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or [Erase ]
for deletion.
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
110), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
113
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
111), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
113), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
111) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
110) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
selection method, and then press the [ ]
button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
113), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
115).
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
113), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
115
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
101), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
109), “Protecting
Images” (
=
110), “Erasing Images” (
=
112), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
170), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
172)
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
[ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[Off] (
=
30).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
114) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
110) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
116
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
116 –
=
119) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
size, and then press the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( )
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)
117
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image.
To crop the image based on this frame,
turn the [
] dial to switch to the other
frame.
● Press the [
] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
116).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
52) or resized to [ ] (
=
116).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
47), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
(
1
) (
2
) (
3
)
5
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ] button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
52).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
118
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
116).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
77).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
116).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
77).
119
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [
],
but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
30).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
108).
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
116).
120
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
● The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
155).
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end
(excluding digest movies (
=
35)).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
101), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the
beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by
choosing [ ], and cut the end of the
movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
121
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
35) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
104) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] or
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
● [
] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
122
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can
also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
7
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
123
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
126).
1
Install CameraWindow.
● For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the
smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
● For other Android smartphones, nd
CameraWindow in Google Play and
download and install the app.
● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, nd
CameraWindow in the App Store and
download and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ] button.
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
31). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
● Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
123)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
importing images from a smartphone (
=
123). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
125)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
CameraWindow app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● No matter how you connect the devices, you can also use the
smartphone to geotag (
=
141) camera images and shoot
remotely (
=
142).
124
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
6
Choose a smartphone to connect to.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
smartphone, and then press the [ ]
button.
● After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
7
Import images.
● Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Start CameraWindow.
● For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark
( ) will start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
● For other smartphones, start
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
● After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
125
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
123).
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● For better security, you can require password input on the screen
in step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
30) and choosing [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
● One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign
a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
30) ►
[
] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
126).
1
Install CameraWindow.
● Follow step 1 in “Sending to a
Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
123) to install CameraWindow on a
smartphone.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● If a screen requesting the device
nickname is displayed, enter the
nickname (
=
123).
126
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
138).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 6.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen.
Either follow steps 1 – 3 in “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
123) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
125).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
6
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures starting from step 1.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
143).
127
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
What you will need:
● Computer
● USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Switch Network], and then press the [
]
button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (
=
130).
● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
132) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
● Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
125) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
123) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
125).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
126).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
126) from step 4.
128
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Without Connecting the Camera
● Select [Install without connecting
the device] and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
4
Install the les.
● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the
cable.
● Because the content and functions of software vary according to
the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use
each camera to update to its latest version of the software.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the Internet,
access http://www.canon.com/icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
2
Begin the installation.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
3
When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
When Connecting the Camera to the
Computer
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
● Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
(
1
)
(
2
)
129
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Wi-Fi” (
=
196).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
130) or not (
=
132). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
130
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[WPS Connection], and then press the
[ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [PBC
Method], and then press the [ ] button.
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
30)
► [
] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
31). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
131
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
10
Display CameraWindow.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11
Import images.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (
=
164).
7
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
target device name, and then press the
[ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
132
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
31).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Next], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Auto], and then press the [ ] button.
● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
130).
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
130).
● To reconnect to the access point, conrm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
130).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed after connection, and then either follow the procedure in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
130) from step 5 or the
procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (
=
132) from step 2.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
130).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
network (access point), and then press
the [ ] button.
133
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera web link
settings page.
● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2
Choose the type of camera.
● On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
● Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
3
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button.
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
=
31). On the [Device Nickname]
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
134
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
8
Check the conrmation numbers
and complete the setup process.
● Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
● [
] (
=
139) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [
] icon changes
to [ ].
● A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
135) from step 2.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and
choose a device.
4
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Authenticate].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Authenticate], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
130) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
132).
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
7
Enter the authentication code.
● On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
● A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
135
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
icon of the Web service for sharing, and
then press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen by pressing the [
][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed. Press the [
] button to return
to the playback screen.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (
=
133).
1
Access the Web service settings
screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (
=
133) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
● In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
136
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
136).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
125).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or
add comments before sending (
=
138).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
125).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Choose the printer.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
printer name, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
166).
● To cancel the connection, press the [
]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons on the
conrmation screen to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
126).
138
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
Notes on Sending Images
● Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(
=
3). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to ve
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
121), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
4
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To cancel the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
30) ► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
138).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
139
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
133).
● To choose a Web service as the
destination, follow the steps in
“Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
135) to update the camera settings.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ]
button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
30) ► [ ] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
31).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
140
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
● If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [
] as described in steps
1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
135).
● Once the connection is established,
the images are sent. When the images
have been sent successfully to the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [
] is
displayed on the screen.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
155).
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
● Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
123).
● Access the mobile connection screen
as described in step 2 in “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
123), press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
● Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
127).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
CameraWindow.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
141)
● Shoot remotely (
=
142)
● In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view
camera images (
=
123,
=
125,
=
143).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
146)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have congured in advance
may be changed automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Secure the camera.
● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
123, =
125).
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote shooting.
● In CameraWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
4
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
143
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname] (
=
143)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
125)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
143)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
143), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
31).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
143), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to access
the device selection screen, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon
of a device to edit, and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose a device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose an item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
● The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
144
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
30).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Reset Settings], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
] tab (
=
152).
145
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
30) functions on the [ ] tab can be congured. Customize
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
101) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
8
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
146
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
180).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
21) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
29) or
MENU (
=
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the setting.
147
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
26).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
147) to [On].
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
25). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
180).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
148
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
● When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Screen and viewnder brightness can be set separately. Activate the
desired display in advance by pressing the [ ] button.
● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when
in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness]
setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or restart
the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
149
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted (
=
148)) memory card.
● Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (
=
164) for information
on the card folder structure and image formats.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
148), press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level
Format], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is
displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
148) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
148), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
150
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
96) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
● Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
● Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Choose [Calibrate] and press the
[
] button. A conrmation message is
displayed.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
● Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [
] button.
● Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in GPS elevation information
(
=
103,
=
141), the zoom bar (
=
33), the MF indicator (
=
79),
and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
● Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(
=
151) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo Display], and
then press the [
] button.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
● Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter Copyright
Details]. Press the [ ] button to access
the keyboard, and enter the name
(
=
31).
● Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Yes], and then press
the [ ] button.
● The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
● You can also use the software (
=
164) to enter, change, and
delete copyright information. Some characters entered with the
software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly
recorded in images.
● You can check copyright information recorded in images by using
the software, once you save the images to a computer.
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
157)
● [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
122)
● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
123)
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
47)
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
146), [Time Zone] (
=
146),
[Language
] (
=
152), and [Video System] (
=
157)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
77)
- Shooting mode (
=
59)
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
122)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
150)
153
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
9
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
154
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
System Map
Neck Strap
Battery Pack
NB-10L*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC80
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
Flash Units
Lens Accessories
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Speedlite*
3
600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, 430EX II,
320EX, 270EX II
Canon-Brand Lens Filter
(67 mm dia.)*
4
Lens Hood
LH-DC90
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Other Accessories
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX,
270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, and Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2.
*4 Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC67A.
155
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Flash Units
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/580EX
II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
● Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
● Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
● Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-10L
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
156
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
● For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-denition TV.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
● Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Lens Hood LH-DC90
● Prevents extraneous light outside the
angle of view from entering the lens and
causing ares or ghosting, which reduce
image quality.
Filter Adapter FA-DC67A
● Adapter required when mounting a 67
mm lter.
Canon Lens Filter (67 mm dia.)
● Protects the lens and enables a variety of
shooting effects.
● A lens lter and lens cap cannot be attached to the camera at the
same time.
157
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to video
input.
● Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
181).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed in
high denition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
158
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
54), MF-Point Zoom (
=
79)
and MF Peaking (
=
80) are not available.
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Open the cover.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (
=
19) to
open the memory card/battery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown.
3
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
● Insert the adapter plug fully into the
coupler.
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
● Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Display images.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Denition TV” (
=
157) to display
images.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using an External Microphone
An external microphone with a mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) can be
connected to the external microphone IN terminal (
=
3) for use in
recording. Note that the built-in microphone is not used for recording when
an external microphone is connected.
Open the cover and connect the
external microphone.
● Any attenuator settings you have congured are also applied to
recording with the external microphone (
=
69).
● Connecting an external microphone will deactivate [Wind Filter]
(
=
69).
4
Insert the coupler.
● Insert the coupler as shown until it locks
into place.
● Lower the cover (1), keeping the coupler
cable in the coupler cable port (2).
5
Connect the power cord.
● Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
● Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
● When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
160
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Attaching a lens lter to the camera protects the lens and allows you
to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens lter, you will need Filter
Adapter FA-DC67A (sold separately).
1
Attach the lter adapter.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Align the notches on the camera and the
lter adapter and turn the adapter in the
direction of the arrow until locked.
● To remove the lter adapter, turn it in the
opposite direction.
2
Attach a lter.
● Turn the lter in the direction of the arrow
to attach it to the camera.
● Make sure not to attach the lter too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lter and damage the camera.
● We recommend the use of genuine Canon lters (67 mm dia.).
● When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
● If you use the built-in ash with the lter adapter attached,
portions of the image may appear darker.
● When using the lter adapter, be sure to use only one lter at a
time. Attaching multiple lters, or accessories such as a heavy
lens, may cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
● Do not grip the lter adapter tightly.
● Remove the lter adapter when not using a lter.
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the ash, attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC90 to prevent light outside the angle of view
from entering the lens.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Align the lens hood mark (2) with the
camera mark (1), and turn the lens hood
in the direction of the arrow until it locks
in place.
● To remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
● To attach the lens hood inverted (as
shown) when the hood is not used, align
the lens hood mark (2) with the camera
mark (1), and turn the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow until it locks in
place.
● Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in ash when the lens
hood is attached.
● The lter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
camera at the same time.
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
161
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.
● This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
● Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.
● Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
● Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
● Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Speedlite EX Series
Still Images
Movies
These optional ash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
ash photography needs.
1
Attach the ash.
● Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the ash unit to the hot shoe.
● The lter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
camera at the same time.
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2
Shoot.
● To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
● Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.
162
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
● You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [
] button
for at least one second.
● Flash settings in [
] shooting mode can be congured just as
they are in [
] mode.
● 600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the
external ash has been set up for stroboscopic ash.
● 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [
] icon is shown.
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
● Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-
E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows
next to subjects during vertical shooting.
● To keep the LCD screen out of the way
of the bracket, use the screen closed and
facing outward.
2
Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
● A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
● The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
3
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
● Flash settings can only be congured in
these modes. In other modes, the ash
is adjusted and red automatically, as
needed.
4
Set the white balance to [ ]
(=
76).
5
Congure the external ash.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Options already set on the ash itself are
displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the setting.
● Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the ash attached
(
=
163).
163
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
*3 Can be congured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and ash exposure
compensation set on the ash is [+0]. When you adjust ash exposure
compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the
camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
ash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 For options other than On/Off, congure the setting on the ash unit itself. Not
available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX. When this item is set
to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to
[2nd-curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
*7 Can only be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro],
[Safety FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the
[
] tab on the camera (
=
152).
● Flash settings in [ ] shooting mode can be congured just as
they are in [
] mode.
● In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
camera does not shoot continuously (
=
38).
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can
be congured. (With autoash control, the ash always res.) However,
external ash units do not re in modes that the built-in ash does not re
(
=
182).
Item Options
Shooting Mode
Flash Mode
Auto*
1
O O O
–
Manual*
2
O O O O
Flash Exp.
Comp*
3
–3 to +3
O O O
–
Flash Output*
4
1/128*
5
to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop
increments)
O O O O
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-
speed
O O O O
Slow Synchro
On
O O O O
Off
O
–
O
–
Wireless Func.*
6
On/Off
O O O O
Red-Eye Corr. On/Off
O O O O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O
Safety FE*
7
On
O O O
–
Off
O O O O
Clear Flash Settings*
8
O O O O
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the ash.
*2 M mode is used for the ash.
In [
] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the ash. In this case,
when the ash res, ash exposure compensation set on the ash is applied to
the ash output level set on the camera.
164
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Operating
System*
Windows Mac OS
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
* When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
“Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
127).
● Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(
=
127).
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,
you can do the following things on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images and change camera settings
● ImageBrowser EX
- Manage images: view, search, and organize
- Print and edit images
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
165
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
● Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
● For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (
=
164).
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded).
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
(
1
)
(
2
)
166
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available,
such as movie editing.
167
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● After following steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
166) to choose an image, press the
[ ] button to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (
=
168).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(
=
168).
3
Turn the printer on.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
6
Print the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
156).
● RAW images cannot be printed.
168
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
167) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
167) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the [
] button.
● Press the [
] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
166)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
169
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
166) to choose a movie, and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. This
screen is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the printing method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
168), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item. Choose the length by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
168) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
170
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
20).
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
172) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and congure items as desired
(
=
30).
171
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
171), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
111) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
171), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
171), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
number of prints (up to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
172
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
● After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software
Instruction Manual” (
=
164) and the printer manual for further
information.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
172), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added to the
print list (
=
170 –
=
171), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
173
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
172), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
172), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
174
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
18).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
19).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
19).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
157).
10
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
175
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
86).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
72).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
75,
=
118).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
72).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
33).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
72).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
72).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
36).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
198).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
87,
=
94).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
73).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
198).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
33).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
87,
=
94).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
73).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
59).
Subjects are affected by red-eye (
=
52).
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
55). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
3) will
be activated in ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
119).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
149).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
182 –
=
187).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
101), press the shutter button halfway (
=
26).
Nothing is displayed (
=
36).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
28).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
No date stamp is added to images.
● Congure the [Date Stamp ] setting (
=
20). Note that date stamps are not
added to images automatically, merely because you have congured the [Date/
Time] setting (
=
45).
● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (
=
187) in which this setting
cannot be congured (
=
45).
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
36).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
36).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
90).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
86).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
73).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
90).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
26).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
198).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
55).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
82,
=
85).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
176
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
145) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
145) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
62) or [ ] (
=
70) mode, or
when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable] (
=
37), because audio is not recorded.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
25).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during detailed
information display, magnied display, or index display. Switch to single-image
display and a viewing mode other than detailed information display. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
● [
] will not be displayed even in playback mode, when using magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. [
] will also not
be displayed when an image is displayed by specifying search conditions. Cancel
ltered image playback.
● [
] will not be displayed when the camera is connected to a printer or computer
with a cable. Disconnect the cable.
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (
=
47). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (
=
47), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (
=
146).
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
148,
=
198).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
149).
- Lower the image quality (
=
53).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
198).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (
=
62) and [ ]
(
=
70) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (
=
164)
for details on folder structure and le names.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
149).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
177
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or
[
] to reduce sending time (
=
139).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is
displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
144).
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
143).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
133).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application CameraWindow on
your smartphone (
=
123).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
127,
=
129).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
196). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent. In [
] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
139). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
178
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identication information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
107), Magnify* (
=
108), Smart Shufe* (
=
110), Rotate*
(
=
114), Favorites (
=
115), Edit* (
=
116), Print List* (
=
170), and
Photobook Set-up* (
=
172).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
111,
=
113,
=
171), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
170) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
172). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
170) or Photobook Set-up (
=
172) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
110), Erase
(
=
112), Favorites (
=
115), Print List (
=
170), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
172).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
149), or format the memory card (
=
148).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (
=
19).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card error (
=
149)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
33,
=
57,
=
71,
=
92) or edit images (
=
116). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
112) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
19).
Charge the battery (
=
18)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
110)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
179
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
139) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
166) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
168). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
129).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
129).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
180
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
(17) Digital zoom magnification
(
=
40), Digital tele-converter
(
=
81)
(18) Remaining time (
=
198)
(19) Histogram (
=
103)
(20) Focusing range (
=
79), AF lock
(
=
85)
(21) Blink detection (
=
55)
(22) AF frame (
=
82), Spot AE point
frame (
=
72)
(23) Date stamp (
=
45)
(24) DR correction (
=
75)
(25) AE lock (
=
72), FE lock
(
=
88)
(26) Shutter speed (
=
92,
=
93)
(27) Aperture value (
=
93)
(28) Electronic level (
=
54)
(29) Exposure level (
=
93)
(30) ISO speed (
=
73)
(31) Grid lines (
=
96)
(32) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
35)
(33) Zoom bar (
=
33)
(34)
Auto (
=
42)
(35) Wind filter (
=
69)
(36) Time zone (
=
146)
(37) Image stabilization (
=
90)
(38) MF indicator (
=
79)
(39) Exposure compensation level
(
=
72)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
The same information is shown on the viewnder.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
8
)
(
7
)
(
9
)
(
11
)(
12
)(
13
)(
14
) (
15
)(
16
)(
17
)(
18
) (
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
23
)
(
24
)
(
35
)
(
34
)
(
38
)(
39
)
(
25
)
(
10
)
(
32
)
(
26
) (
27
)(
28
) (
29
) (
30
) (
31
)
(
36
)
(
37
)
(
33
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
182), Scene
icon (
=
37)
(2) Flash mode (
=
86), LED light
(
=
161)
(3)
Flash exposure compensation / Flash
output level (
=
87,
=
94)
(4) Metering method (
=
72),
Shadow correction (
=
76)
(5) Drive mode (
=
86), AEB
shooting (
=
74), Focus
bracketing (
=
80)
(6) White balance (
=
76), Mercury
lamp correction (
=
53)
(7) My Colors (
=
77)
(8) Eco mode (
=
147)
(9) Self-timer (
=
44)
(10) Camera shake warning (
=
36)
(11) Red-eye correction (
=
52)
(12) IS mode icon (
=
39)
(13) Battery level (
=
180)
(14) Still image compression (
=
90),
Resolution (
=
52)
(15) Recordable shots (
=
197)*
(16) Movie quality (
=
53)
181
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
(27) Image quality / Frame rate (movies)
(
=
52,
=
53,
=
70),
Image editing (
=
116)
(28) Group playback (
=
107)
(29) Compression (image quality)
(
=
90) / Resolution (
=
52,
=
53,
=
70), Digest movies
(
=
35), RAW (
=
89), MP4
(movies)
(30) Still images: Resolution (
=
197)
Movies: Playback time (
=
198)
(31) File size
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
157).
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)(
3
) (
4
)(
5
)(
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
)
(
17
)
(
23
) (
25
) (
27
) (
29
)
(
24
) (
26
) (
28
)
(
30
) (
31
)
(
18
) (
19
) (
20
) (
21
) (
22
)
(1) Movies (
=
33,
=
101)
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(3) Histogram (
=
103)
(4) Battery level (
=
180)
(5) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
138)
(6) Image Sync (
=
139)
(7) Image editing (
=
116), Movie
compression (
=
121)
(8) Favorites (
=
115)
(9) Protection (
=
110)
(10) Folder number - File number
(
=
149)
(11) Shooting date/time (
=
20)
(12) Shooting mode (
=
182)
(13) Shutter speed (
=
92,
=
93)
(14) Aperture value (
=
93),
Image quality (movies)
(
=
52,
=
53,
=
70)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
=
72), Exposure shift level
(
=
68)
(16) ISO speed (
=
73), Playback
speed (
=
63)
(17) Metering method (
=
72)
(18) Flash (
=
86), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
87)
(19) White balance (
=
76)
(20) White balance correction
(
=
77), Mercury lamp
correction (
=
53), Creative
Shot effect (
=
58)
(21) My Colors (
=
77,
=
118)
(22) Focusing range (
=
79)
(23) Red-eye correction
(
=
52,
=
119)
(24) High ISO NR (
=
74)
(25) DR correction (
=
75)
(26) Shadow correction (
=
76),
i-Contrast (
=
118)
182
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Av/Tv Settings (
=
92,
=
93)
Aperture Value
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Shutter Speed
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Program Shift (
=
72)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Lock (when assigned to the [ ] button (
=
85))
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Move AF Frame (
=
82)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Face Select (
=
85)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
101).
Exit
Play
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback
speed. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
121) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
121) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Edit (
=
120)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (
=
121))
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
166).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
183
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
4
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Focusing Range (
=
79,
=
85)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash (
=
86)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / *
5
/ *
5
/ / / / /
/ / *
5
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Tracking AF (
=
83)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Resize AF Frame (
=
82)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Exposure Compensation (
=
72)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (
=
96)*
2
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AE Lock/FE Lock (
=
68,
=
72,
=
88)*
3
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Drive Mode (
=
86)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
184
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shadow Correction (
=
76)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
ISO Speed (
=
73)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
White Balance (
=
76)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
87)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Change Display (
=
28)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 When assigned to the [
] button (
=
96).
*3 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*4 [
] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
*5 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
FUNC. Menu
DR Correction (
=
75)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
185
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Self-Timer Settings (
=
44)
Delay*
4
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shots*
5
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Metering Method (
=
72)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
51)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
White Balance Correction (
=
77)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
My Colors (
=
77)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / *
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / *
3
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Bracketing (
=
74,
=
80)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Self-Timer (
=
44)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
186
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Movie Quality (
=
53,
=
70)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / *
6
/ / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / *
6
/ / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 White balance is not available.
*3 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone. Default: 3. These setting are applied in all modes.
*4 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*6 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
63).
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Resolution (
=
52)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Compression (
=
90)
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Image Type (
=
89)
/ /
*
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
187
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
AF-Point Zoom (
=
54)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Servo AF (
=
84)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / *
5
/ / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Continuous AF (
=
84)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shooting Tab
AF Frame (
=
82)
Face Detect*
1
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Tracking AF
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / *
3
/ / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
FlexiZone/Center*
4
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Digital Zoom (
=
40)
Standard
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
1.6x/2.0x
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
188
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Recall Zoom/MF Settings (
=
81)
Zoom Memory
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
MF Memory
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
MF Peaking Settings (
=
80)
Peaking
On/Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Level
High/Low
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF-assist Beam (
=
55)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
MF-Point Zoom (
=
79)
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
2x/4x
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Safety MF (
=
79)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
189
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2nd-curtain
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Red-Eye Corr.
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Safety FE
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Control (
=
52,
=
55,
=
87,
=
88,
=
94)
Flash Mode
Auto
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Manual
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Exp. Comp
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Output
Minimum/Medium/Maximum
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
190
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Safety Shift (
=
93)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Sound rec. (
=
68)
Sound rec.
Auto
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Manual
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Disable
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Level
0 – 47* – 63
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
ISO Auto Settings (
=
74)
Max ISO Speed
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Rate of Change
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
High ISO NR (
=
74)
Low/Standard*/High
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
53)
On/Off*
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Spot AE Point (
=
72)
Center
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Point
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
191
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Display Info
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Detailed
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Blink Detection (
=
55)
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Custom Display (
=
96)
Shooting Info
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Grid Lines
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Electronic Level
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Wind lter/Attenuator
Wind Filter: Auto
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Wind Filter: Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Attenuator: Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Attenuator: On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Review image after shooting (
=
56)
Display Time
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Quick
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
192
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
2
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Display Area (
=
40)
Large/Medium/Small*
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Auto Settings (
=
42,
=
43)
Seek Assist
On
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Auto Zoom
Face/Upper Body/Whole Body/Manual
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Histogram
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
FUNC. Menu Layout (
=
97)
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Reverse Disp. (
=
20)
On/Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
IS Settings (
=
90)
IS Mode
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Continuous
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shoot Only
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Dynamic IS
1
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
193
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Set button (
=
96)
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Save Settings (
=
98)
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*3 Only available by pressing the [
] button (
=
72).
*4 [FlexiZone] in [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, otherwise [Center].
*5 [On] when subject movement is detected in [
] mode.
Date Stamp (
=
45)
Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Date
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Date & Time
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Digest Type (
=
35)
Include Stills*/No Stills
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Face ID Settings (
=
47)
On*/Off
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Set Shortcut button (
=
96)
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Set button (
=
96)
*
2
/ *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
194
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
My Menu Tab
Item Ref. Page
My Menu settings
=
99
Playback Tab
Item Ref. Page
Image Search
=
105
List/Play Digest Movies
=
104
Smart Shufe
=
110
Slideshow
=
109
Erase
=
112
Protect
=
110
Rotate
=
114
Favorites
=
115
Photobook Set-up
=
172
i-Contrast
=
118
Red-Eye Correction
=
119
Cropping
=
117
Resize
=
116
My Colors
=
118
Face ID Info
=
104
Transition Effect
=
101
Index Effect
=
105
Scroll Display
=
101
Group Images
=
107
Auto Rotate
=
115
Set Up Tab
Item Ref. Page
Mute
=
145
Volume
=
145
Hints & Tips
=
146
Date/Time
=
146
Time Zone
=
146
Lens Retraction
=
147
Eco Mode
=
147
Power Saving
=
26,
=
147
LCD Brightness
=
148
Start-up Image
=
148
Format
=
148,
=
149
File Numbering
=
149
Create Folder
=
150
Units
=
150
Electronic Level
=
150
Video System
=
157
Wi-Fi Settings
=
122
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
123
Copyright Info
=
151
Certication Logo Display
=
151
Language
=
152
Reset All
=
152
195
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag
or similar container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over
extended periods (about a year) may shorten its life or affect
performance.
Item Ref. Page
Resume
=
101
Set Shortcut button
=
96
Print Tab
Item Ref. Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
171
Select Range
=
171
Select All Images
=
171
Clear All Selections
=
171
Print Settings
=
170
196
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Supported
Channels
1 – 11 (PC2188) or 1 – 13 (PC2154)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
21 – 5460 mm
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 33.6 ‒ 2184.0 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 42.0 ‒ 2730.0 mm
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 16.1 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
65x zoom: 3.8 (W) – 247.0 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 21 (W) – 1365 (T) mm)
Viewnder
LCD Viewnder
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
Dioptric Adjustment Range: –
4.0 to +1.0 m
-1
(dpt)
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version
1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon
Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
127.6 x 92.6 x 114.3 mm (5.02 x 3.65 x 4.50 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 650 g (approx. 22.93 oz.; including the
battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 607 g (approx. 21.41 oz.; camera body only)
197
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
51) of 4:3 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory
Card (Approx. shots)
8 GB 32 GB
(Large)
16M/
4608x3456
1058 4272
1705 6883
(Medium 1)
8M/
3264x2448
1996 8059
3069 12391
(Medium 2)
3M/2048x1536
4723 19064
8469 34184
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
27291 110150
40937 165225
RAW Images
4608x3456
– 317 1284
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots
Screen On Approx. 340
Screen Off
Viewnder On
Approx. 340
Eco Mode On Approx. 450
Movie Recording
Time*
1
Screen On Approx. 1 hour
Screen Off
Viewnder On
Approx. 1 hour
Movie Recording
Time
(Continuous
Shooting*
2
)
Screen On Approx. 2 hours
Screen Off
Viewnder On
Approx. 2 hours
Playback Time Approx. 6 hours
*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed,
such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
198
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focusing
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(
)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
0 cm (0.0 in.) – innity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – innity
–
1 m (3.3 ft.) – innity 15 m (49 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – innity
*
0 – 50 cm
(0.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
*
0 cm (0.0 in.) – innity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – innity
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting Mode Speed
Approx. 6.4 shots/sec.
Approx. 3.8 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.6 shots/sec.
● Using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specied in Canon testing
standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
8 GB 32 GB
30 min. 3 sec.*
1
2 hr. 1 min. 27 sec.*
2
43 min. 29 sec. 2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
2 hr. 3 min. 55 sec. 8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec. 21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec.
*1 26 min. 22 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
69).
*2 1 hr. 46 min. 33 sec. for iFrame movies (
=
69).
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and
59 seconds when shooting in [ ], [ ] or [ ], or approximately
1 hour when shooting in [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
50 cm – 5.5 m (1.6 – 18 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
1.8 m – 3.0 m (5.9 – 9.8 ft.)
199
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V), 0.18 A (100 V) –
0.12 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 8.4 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 1 hr. 50 min. (when using NB-10L)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Lens Hood LH-DC90
Camera Mount: Bayonet
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ70.0 x 27.7 mm (ɸ2.76 x 1.09 in.)
Weight: Approx. 9 g (approx. 0.32 oz.)
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set
range
1 – 1/2000 sec.
Available values in
[
], [ ], or [ ]
mode (sec.)*
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8,
0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13,
1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400,
1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000
* In [ ] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
f/number f/3.4 / f/8.0 (W) – f/6.5 / f/8.0 (T)
Available values in
[
], [ ], or [ ]
mode*
f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.3, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/6.5,
f/7.1, f/8.0
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-10L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 7.4 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 920 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions: 32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)
Weight: Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)
200
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Index
A
AC adapter kit 155, 158
Accessories 155
AEB shooting 74
AE lock 72
AF frames 82
AF lock 85
Aspect ratio 51
Attenuator 69
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 33
Av (shooting mode) 93
AV cable 158
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Power saving 26
Battery charger 2, 155
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 147
Level 180
Power saving 26
Black and white images 77
Blink detection 55
C
C1/C2 (shooting mode) 98
Camera
Reset all 152
Camera access point mode 132
CameraWindow (computer) 164
CameraWindow (smartphone) 123
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 133
Center (AF frame mode) 82
Clock 32
Color (white balance) 76
Compression ratio (image quality) 90
Connecting via an access point 129
Creative lters (shooting mode) 60
Creative Shot 57
Cropping 117, 168
Custom white balance 77
D
Date/time
Adding date stamps 45
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 146
DC coupler 158
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 81
Digital zoom 40
Display language 21
DPOF 170
Dynamic Range Correction 75
E
Eco mode 147
Editing
Cropping 117
i-Contrast 118
My Colors 118
Red-eye correction 119
Resizing images 116
Editing or erasing connection
information 143
Electronic level 54
Erasing 112
Erasing all 114
Error messages 178
Exposure
AE lock 72
Compensation 72
FE lock 88
External microphone 159
F
Face detect (AF frame mode) 83
Face ID 47
Face select 85
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 66
Favorites 115
FE lock 88
File numbering 149
Fireworks (shooting mode) 59
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 62
Flash
Deactivating ash 87
Flash exposure compensation 87
On 86
Slow synchro 87
FlexiZone (AF frame mode) 82
Focus bracketing 80
Focusing
AF frames 82
AF lock 85
AF-point zoom 54
Face select 85
Focus memory 81
MF peaking 80
Servo AF 84
Focusing range
Macro 79
Manual focus 79
Focus lock 82
Framing Assist
Lock 41
Seek 40
Front dial 106
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 29
Table 184
FUNC. menu layout 97
G
Geotagging images 141
GPS information display 103
Grid lines 96
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 59
HDMI cable 156, 157
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 61
Household power 158
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 35
I
i-Contrast 75, 118
iFrame movies (movie mode) 69
Image quality
→
Compression ratio (image quality)
Images
Display period 56
Erasing 112
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 110
201
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Self-timer 44
2-second self-timer 44
Customizing the self-timer 44
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) 66
Wink self-timer
(shooting mode) 65
Sending images 140
Sending images to another
camera 137
Sending images to a smartphone 123
Sending images to Web services 133
Sepia tone images 77
Servo AF 84
Shadow Correct 76
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 96, 180
Shortcut 96
Slideshow 109
Smart Shufe 110
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 65
Smile (shooting mode) 65
Snow (shooting mode) 59
Soft focus (shooting mode) 64
Software
Installation 127, 164
Saving images to
a computer 165
Sounds 145
Sports (shooting mode) 58
Stereo AV cable 155, 158
Strap 2
Super slow motion movie
(movie mode) 70
Super vivid (shooting mode) 60
T
Terminal 157, 158, 166
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 63
Tracking AF (AF frame mode) 83
Traveling with the camera 146
Troubleshooting 174
TV display 157
Tv (shooting mode) 92
V
Viewnder 27
Viewing 24
Image search 105
Index display 105
Jump display 106
Magnied display 108
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 109
Smart Shufe 110
TV display 157
W
White balance (color) 76
Wi-Fi functions 122
Wi-Fi menu 125
Wind lter 69
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 65
World clock 146
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom 22, 33, 40, 81
Zoom framing assist 40
Image stabilization 90
Image Sync 139
Indicator 32, 55
ISO speed 73
J
Jump display 106
L
Low light (shooting mode) 59
M
M (shooting mode) 93
Macro (focusing range) 79
Magnied display 108
Manual focus (focusing range) 79
Manual (movie mode) 95
Memory cards 2
Recording time 198
Menu
Basic operations 30
Table 182
Mercury lamp correction 53
Metering method 72
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 62
Mobile device connection button 123
Monochrome (shooting mode) 64
Movies
Editing 120
Image quality (resolution/
frame rate) 53, 70
Recording time 198
Multi-area White Balance 53
My Colors 77, 118
N
Neck strap
→
Strap
P
P (shooting mode) 71
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 172
PictBridge 156, 166
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 59
Poster effect (shooting mode) 60
Power 155
→
Batteries
→
Battery charger
Power saving 26
Printing 166
Program AE 71
Protecting 110
R
RAW 89
Red-eye correction 52, 119
Remote shooting 142
Reset all 152
Resizing images 116
Resolution (image size) 52
Rotating 114
S
Saving images to a computer 165
Screen
Display language 21
Icons 180, 181
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 105
Seek Assist 43
202
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
203
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4
P Mode
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
